291697.ps 11C41-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 09/17/2010 16:27:50
200
OWNER’S MANUAL
2011
200
OWNER’S MANUAL
2011
Chrysler Group LLC
11C41-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
Chrysler Group LLC
11C41-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2011 2002011 200
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 89
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................183
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................283
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 371
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................391
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................441
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 457
10
INDEX
...................................................................467
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction ........................... 4
䡵 How To Use This Manual .................. 4
䡵 Warnings And Cautions ................... 6
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6
䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ............ 7
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped on the right front door sill
under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
The stamped VIN is located on the right front door sill
under the sill moulding.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫ Ignition Key Removal .................. 12
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ............... 14
▫ Locking The Doors With The Key .......... 14
䡵 Sentry Key威 .......................... 15
▫ Replacement Keys ..................... 16
▫ Customer Key Programming ............. 16
▫ General Information ................... 17
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ........ 18
▫ Rearming The System .................. 18
▫ To Arm The System ................... 18
▫ To Disarm The System ................. 19
䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped ........... 20
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 20
▫ To Unlock The Doors .................. 21
▫ To Lock The Doors .................... 23
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk .................. 24
2
▫ Remote Open Window Feature —
If Equipped ......................... 25
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ................. 25
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ...... 25
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement .......... 25
▫ General Information ................... 26
䡵 Remote Start System — If Equipped ......... 27
▫ How To Use Remote Start ............... 27
䡵 Door Locks ........................... 30
▫ Manual Door Locks ................... 30
▫ Power Door Locks .................... 31
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .......................... 33
䡵 Power Windows ....................... 34
▫ Power Window Switches ................ 34
▫ Auto Window Down — If Equipped ....... 35
▫ Auto Window Up — If Equipped .......... 36
▫ Window Lockout Switch ................ 37
▫ Wind Buffeting ....................... 37
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release ................. 38
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning ................... 39
▫ Trunk Internal Emergency Release ......... 39
䡵 Occupant Restraints ..................... 39
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 43
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .... 47
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 48
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Rear Seat Belts ....................... 49
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ..... 49
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped ......................... 49
▫ Energy Management Feature ............. 50
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ................. 51
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints
(AHR) — If Equipped .................. 51
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 55
▫ BeltAlert威 Programming ................ 56
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 57
▫ Seat Belt Extender ..................... 57
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags ............................ 57
▫ Air Bag System Components ............. 59
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features .......... 60
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 64
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 71
▫ Child Restraints ...................... 72
▫ Transporting Pets ..................... 83
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 83
䡵 Safety Tips ........................... 84
▫ Transporting Passengers ................ 84
▫ Exhaust Gas ......................... 84
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 85
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 87
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the
key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers
can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized
dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers
and keep them in a safe place.
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transaxle
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward,
rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
Vehicle Key
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
If you try to remove the key before you place the shift
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tempo-
rarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder. If this
occurs, rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove
the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the
system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock
cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inop-
erable. The engine can be started and stopped, but the
key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either door will cancel this feature.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK 3 — ON/RUN
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 4 — START
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC), the power window switches,
radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Open-
ing either front door will cancel this feature. The time
for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE:
•
The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the
ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position.
•
With either front door open, and the key in the
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Key-
less Entry (RKE) transmitter will not function.
Locking the Doors with the Key
There is only one external door lock cylinder which is
located in the driver’s door.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward. To unlock the door, turn the
key forward. For door lock lubrication, see “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” of this
manual.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
key to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your vehicle have been
programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key威 has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Key威 from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
The PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro-
gramming procedure. This procedure consists of pro-
gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank
key is one which has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid Sentry Keys威 by performing the following proce-
dure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at least
three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the
first key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within
15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the indicator
light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn
off.
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-
grammed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威 contact your
authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to your autho-
rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk
for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthor-
ized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid
release are disabled.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes. For the first three
minutes, the horn will sound intermittently and the
headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash and
the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash. Then
the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
To Arm The System
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch
(one door must be open) or the LOCK button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be
open or closed), and close all doors.
NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you
lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers.
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash for 16 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is
opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or the
power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
NOTE:
•
During the 16-second arming period, if a door is
opened or the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
•
Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the
unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and
passenger door trim panel, the trunk release button on
the instrument panel, and the HomeLink威/Garage
Door Opener (if equipped).
To Disarm The System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid Sentry Key威 into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START position.
NOTE:
•
The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
•
The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm
the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the
vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has oc-
curred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If the alarm was triggered, but the warning signals have
timed out, the park and taillights flash three times, and
the horn will chirp three times, when unlocking the
vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the
ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF
position..
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
•
The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
the trunk, lower both front windows (if equipped), or
activate the Panic Alarm from distances approximately
66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
The line of transmission must not be blocked with
metal objects.
•
Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The Illuminated Entry
system (if equipped) will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Vehicle Key
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are
inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm
system. Opening a door with the system activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system.
Flash Lights With Lock
The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button
while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in
the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm
system. Opening a door with the system activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system.
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with EVIC. For details, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with EVIC, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
mitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than
10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still
holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in
the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Opening a door with the alarm activated will cause the
alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times to unlatch the trunk.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Open Window Feature — If Equipped
The RKE remotely lowers both driver and passenger
front windows simultaneously. Lowering the front win-
dows using the RKE is a two step operation:
1. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button once.
2. Press the UNLOCK button a second time and hold the
button until the windows lower completely or the win-
dows drop to the desired level, then release the button.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the Illuminated Entry system (if
equipped) will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when
using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due
to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises emitted by the
system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE
transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
of a battery is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
REMOTE START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Trunk closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed
•
System not disabled from previous remote start event
•
Vehicle theft alarm not active
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
•
Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
•
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
•
Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
•
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
•
If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
•
The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
•
Any engine warning lamps come on
•
Fuel lamp turns on
•
The hood is opened
•
The hazard switch is pressed
•
The transmission is moved out of PARK
•
The brake pedal is pressed
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one-time press of the Remote Start button
for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start
request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
inside door handle.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-
sonal injuries or death.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Lock Knob
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger
door panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled
by your authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for
programming.
Power Door Lock Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Auto Unlock On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/
RUN and then back to LOCK four times, ending up in the
LOCK position.
3. Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have a Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
The Child-Protection Door Locks are located inside the
rear edge of the door. Insert the tip of the ignition key or
similar flat-bladed object into the lock and rotate approxi-
mately one-quarter turn to the lock or unlock position (as
indicated by the stamped icons).
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (UNLOCKED position), roll
down the window, and open the door with the outside
door handle.
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
The control on the driver’s door has up/down switches
that give you fingertip control of all four power win-
dows.
Child Lock Control
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There is a single window control on the front and rear
passenger’s door trim panel, which operates the front
and rear passenger door windows. The window controls
will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN or ACC position, and when the accessory
delay feature is active.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Auto Window Down — If Equipped
The front window controls on the driver and passenger
door trim panels have an Auto-Down feature. These
switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
AUTO Power Window Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch
either in the up or down direction and release the switch.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will
cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either door will
cancel this feature. The time for this feature is program-
mable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Auto Window Up — If Equipped
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
To cancel the Auto Up movement, operate the switch
either in the up or down direction and release the switch.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE: ANTI-PINCH PROTECTION
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
When the window is almost closed, there is no
anti-pinch protection. To avoid personal injury, be
sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects
from the window path before closing.
Reset Auto Up
Anytime the vehicle battery goes dead, the Auto Up
function will be disabled. To reactivate the Auto Up
feature, pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window LOCK button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Window Lockout Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
Use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to open the trunk from
outside the vehicle. From inside the
vehicle the trunk lid can be released by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button
located on the instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The shift lever must be in PARK for this button
to operate.
To unlatch the trunk lid from outside the vehicle, press
and release the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter
two times.
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
word “deck” will display in place of the odometer
display indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer
display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the
trip button is depressed.
With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the
key out, the word “deck” will display until the trunk is
closed.
On EVIC-equipped vehicles, the words “Trunk Ajar” will
display.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching
mechanism.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
•
Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint) — if equipped
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a
window
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
•
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
•
All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
•
In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or accidents. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in an accident the belt will lock and
reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out.
WARNING!
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident the
best.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in an accident much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident.
Positioning the Lap Belt
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in an accident. The belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but
across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push anchorage button to release the anchor-
age, and move it up or down to the position that serves
you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Belts
The shoulder belt anchorages of the rear three-point belts
are nonadjustable for outboard and center rear passen-
gers on sedans. The center belt is mounted to the rear
shelf panel and exits through a bezel in the panel.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re-
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
Driver Center Passenger
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR ALR ALR
•
N/A — Not Applicable
•
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
accident. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupant’s chest.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an
accident. These devices may improve the performance of
the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) —
If Equipped
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
ity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
2 — Seatback
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an
accident.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
3—
Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
•
For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver to
fasten their seat belt. This feature is active whenever the
ignition is on. If the driver is unbelted, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the
driver seat belt is fastened. BeltAlert威 triggers within
60 seconds of vehicle speed over 5 mph (8 km/h). The
reminder sequence lasts for 96 seconds or until the driver
seat belt is fastened. After the sequence completes, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the
driver seat belt is fastened. The driver should instruct all
other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If the driver seat
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will chime as a single
notification and illuminate the Seat Belt Reminder Light,
then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence.
AHR In Reset Position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert姞 Programming
NOTE: Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de-
activating the BeltAlert威.
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the
ON/RUN or START position.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position and
wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off.
3. Unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at
least three times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat
belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat
belt. It may be necessary to retract the seat belt partially
each time when unbuckling.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is an accident.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender, and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on the severity and type of
collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. If the
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle is equipped with SABIC, they are located above
the side windows. The trim covering the side air bags is
labeled SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
NOTE:
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
•
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC)
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and
Front Passenger
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags may provide
enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bag is marked with an air bag label sewn into the
outboard side of the front seats.
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-
impact head injuries. The SABIC air bags deploy down-
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Location
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should re-
main free from any obstructions.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-
lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occu-
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im-
proved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci-
dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller System serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat includ-
ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your autho-
rized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Small Children
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats. Both types of child
restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder
belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger air
bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, then the child should
use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger air bag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your
child restraints:
•
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt
in a rear seat.
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
All passenger seating positions contain automatic
locking retractors. However, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and
pull it tight if necessary.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
WARNING!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. All rear seating positions have
lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating
LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible, webbing-
mounted lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower
attachments must be installed in the outboard positions
only. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment,
never install LATCH-compatible child seats such that
two seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are
installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent
rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or
the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you
must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If
your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can
only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat
belts. For typical installation instructions, refer to “In-
stalling The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System”.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage, have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars,
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
of the seat cover material. Then, rotate the tether anchor-
age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing
the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the
anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to
provide the most direct path between the anchor and the
child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Installing Child Restraint Tether Strap
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint
to the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Installing Child Restraint Tether Strap
1— Cover A— Tether Strap Hook
3— Attaching Strap B— Tether Anchor
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belts
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor to secure
a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of seat belts
are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use
a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if
you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then
allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For additional
information on ALR, refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”
description under “Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Posi-
tions” section. The chart below defines the seating posi-
tions with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a
cinching latch plate.
Driver Center Passenger
CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR ALR ALR
•
N/A — Not Applicable
•
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect the
latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around, and
insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still
can’t make the child restraint secure, try a different
seating position.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Make sure that:
•
The child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
an accident.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and inter-
fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
•
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•
If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors .............................. 93
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 93
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 94
▫ Power Mirrors ....................... 95
▫ Adjusting Sideview Mirrors .............. 96
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature .......... 96
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 96
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 96
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped ........... 97
▫ Operation .......................... 99
▫ Phone Call Features .................. 107
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features ............. 110
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 114
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone .................... 116
▫ General Information .................. 127
3
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped ........... 127
▫ Voice Command System Operation ........ 127
▫ Commands ........................ 128
▫ Voice Training ...................... 132
䡵 Seats .............................. 132
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ............. 132
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ............ 134
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustment ........... 136
▫ Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster —
If Equipped ........................ 136
▫ Reclining Seats ...................... 137
▫ Lumbar Support — If Equipped .......... 138
▫ Head Restraints ..................... 138
▫ Fold-Flat Passenger Seatback ............ 142
▫ Folding Rear Seat .................... 143
▫ Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest ........ 144
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood ............ 145
䡵 Lights ............................. 146
▫ Multifunction Lever .................. 146
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights .......... 147
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ...... 148
▫ Headlight Time Delay ................. 148
▫ Turn Signals ........................ 148
▫ Lane Change Assist ................... 149
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ............... 149
▫ Flash-To-Pass ....................... 149
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 150
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 150
▫ Lights On Reminder .................. 150
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer .............. 151
▫ Map/Reading/Interior Lights ........... 151
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 152
▫ Intermittent Wiper System .............. 154
▫ Windshield Washers .................. 155
▫ Mist Feature ........................ 156
▫ Headlights With Wipers Feature (Available
With Automatic Headlights Only) ......... 156
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .......... 156
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 157
▫ To Activate ......................... 158
▫ To Set A Desired Speed ................ 159
▫ To Deactivate ....................... 159
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 159
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 159
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .............. 160
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 160
▫ Programming HomeLink威 .............. 162
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 164
▫ Using HomeLink威 ................... 165
▫ Reprogramming A Single
HomeLink威 Button ................... 165
▫ Security ........................... 165
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .................. 166
▫ General Information .................. 166
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 167
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ............ 168
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode ........ 168
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express ............. 168
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ........ 168
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ................. 168
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ............. 169
▫ Sunshade Operation .................. 169
▫ Wind Buffeting ...................... 169
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ................. 169
▫ Ignition Off Operation ................. 170
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets ................. 170
䡵 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —
If Equipped .......................... 174
䡵 Cupholders .......................... 174
▫ Front Seat Cupholders ................. 174
▫ Rear Cupholders ..................... 174
䡵 Storage ............................. 176
▫ Glovebox Storage Compartment .......... 176
䡵 Console Features ...................... 176
▫ Dual Storage Bins .................... 177
䡵 Cargo Area Features ................... 178
▫ Ski Pass-Through .................... 180
䡵 Rear Window Features .................. 181
▫ Rear Window Defroster ................ 181
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move.
When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the
control to the center position to prevent accidentally
moving a mirror.
Power Mirror Switch
Mirror Directions
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Adjusting Sideview Mirrors
Outside Mirror — Driver Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirror — Passenger Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other objects. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and
normal.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Under-
standing the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, lower the sun visor and rotate the mirror
cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi-
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
(Uconnect™ Phone
button and Voice
Command button) that will enable you
to access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or an-
other prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
example, you can use the compound form voice
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
the compound form command into two voice com-
mands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please re-
member, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
pairing instructions:
•
Press the
button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing”.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
Dial By Saying A Number
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial”.
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call”.
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
•
The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry”.
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob”.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-
book entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati-
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
•
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
Entry” feature.
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete”.
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the
button while the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete”.
•
After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
say “Call”.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the
button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Press the
button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the
button until you hear a single beep, indicat-
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the
button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the button
while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call,
as described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
press and hold the
button until you hear a double
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and is usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and
say “Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emer-
gency, your mobile phone must be:
•
turned on,
•
paired to the Uconnect™ System,
•
and have network coverage.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance”.
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),youcan
press the
button and say, “3746#Send”. Saying
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
could press the
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
−
“Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
−
“Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
button
and say “Transfer Call”.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
When prompted, say “List Phones”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the
button and
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sec-
tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
paired phone.
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode):
•
Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
•
Press the button and say the “Voice Training,
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be com-
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
•
press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
Voice Command
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
•
Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
•
You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
load”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom-
ing and Missed Calls.
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
If you wish to hear the new message:
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
•
Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect™ Phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
a new message:
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
•
You can either say the message you wish to send or say
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
To send a message, press the
button while the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes
2. No
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction.
5. L O L
6. Why
7. I love you
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. Iamonmyway
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming mes-
sages.
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
When you press the Voice Command
button, you
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE:
If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the Voice Command
button, listen
for the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
Command
button and say “Help” or “Main
Menu”.
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
•
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
“Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
•
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
−
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the Voice
Command
button to stop playing memos. You
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
−
“Next” (to play the next memo)
−
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
−
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
•
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the
following:
•
“Change to setup”
•
“Switch to system setup”
•
“Change to setup”
•
“Main menu setup” or
•
“Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Language English”
•
“Language French”
•
“Language Spanish”
•
“Tutorial”
•
“Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Press the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use the bottom switch to move the
seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat. The
top switch controls the seatback recliner.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
backward. Push the seatback switch forward or rear-
ward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located on the center of the
instrument panel (above the climate controls).
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Manual Front Seat Adjustment
The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat,
near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear-
ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position
desired. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster —
If Equipped
A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort
for petite as well as tall drivers. A lever with a ratcheting
mechanism, located on the outboard side of the seat,
raises and lowers it. Total travel is 2.2 in (56 mm).
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Seats
The recliner control is located on the side of the seat. To
recline, lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then
lean back to the desired position and release the lever.
Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to
its normal position.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment Lever Seatback Adjustment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The control lever is located
on the outboard side of the driver’s seatback. Turn the
control lever downward to increase and upward to
decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Lumbar Support
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
•
In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se-
cured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The rear seat head restraints are fixed and cannot be
adjusted. For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seatback
The recline handle on the front passenger seat also
releases the seatback to fold forward.
Seatback Adjustment
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The hard seatback features a work surface and a molded
rim for retaining items stored on the seatback panel.
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull on the loops shown in the picture
to fold down either or both seatbacks.
When returning the rear seatback to the upright position,
be sure the seatback is latched.
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat Folding Rear Seats
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
WARNING!
The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children. They
could be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest
The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with
cupholders.
Folding Rear Seat Armrest
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
2. Then lift the secondary latch located under the front
edge of the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
Hood Release Lever
Hood Safety Catch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the left underside of the hood.
NOTE: Before closing the hood, make sure to stow the
prop rod in its proper location.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,
Hood Prop Rod Hole Location
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming
and turn signals. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Headlights And Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
headlight operation.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Turning the end of the multifunction lever to the third
detent (AUTO), will activate the automatic headlight
system.
With the engine running and the multifunction lever in
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on and turn
off based on the surrounding light levels.
Headlight Time Delay
There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle
lights for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned OFF. To activate the headlight delay, the multi-
function lever must be rotated to the off position after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Only the headlights will
illuminate during this time. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Headlight Switch
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you, to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to-
pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next
flash-to-pass operation.
Turn Signal Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the multifunction
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the multifunction lever.
NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the
headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights
will turn off the front fog lights.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime
Running Lights (DRL) and operate at lower intensity
whenever the ignition is ON, the engine is running, the
headlight switch is off, the parking brake is released and
the shift lever is in any position except PARK.
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will turn off
automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn
on again when the turn signal is not operating.
Lights On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Front Fog Light Control
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Map/Reading/Interior Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rearview mirror. Each light can be turned on by
pressing the barrel. Press the barrel a second time to turn
the light off. Both of these lights can swivel so that the
light can be aimed at a specific spot, if desired. The lights
Dimmer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time,
so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the
vehicle. They will not turn off automatically. Interior
lighting also comes on when a door is opened or the
dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second
detent.
There is a second light located midway back in the
headliner.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
Interior Dome Lamp
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for
low-speed wiper operation, or to the HI position for
high-speed wiper operation.
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the park
position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they
are operating. The wipers will resume operation when
you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever Changing Wiper Speeds
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
CAUTION!
•
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
•
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the wind-
shield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval. There are five delay settings, which allow you to
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle
every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles.
Changing Intermittent Settings
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the off position, the wipers will operate for two wipe
cycles and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
Headlights With Wipers Feature
(Available With Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if
they were turned on by this feature.
The headlights with wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
Mist Control
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever down-
ward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the lever upward until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
HomeLink威 Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
and handheld transmitter buttons.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
NOTE:
•
Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the ga-
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light, proceed to “Programming
A Rolling Code System.”
5. Programming A Rolling Code
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink威” Step 3, with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indica-
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•
The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof controls are mounted between the dome/
reading lights.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if so equipped) is in
certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs
with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by
a fuse.
The instrument panel power outlet, located below the
climate control knobs, has power available only when the
ignition is ON. This power outlet will also operate a
conventional cigar lighter unit. To preserve the heating
element, do not hold the lighter in the heating position.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There is a power outlet located on the inside of the center
console. This power outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob
and element must be used.
Instrument Panel Power Outlet Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
CAUTION!
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #16 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
2 — #11 Fuse 15 A Blue Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER —
IF EQUIPPED
An optional ash receiver is available from your autho-
rized dealer and will fit in the center console front
cupholder.
The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter
that can be used with the power outlets. Refer to “Power
Outlets” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders in the center console will accommodate
either two large size cups or two 20 oz (.5 L) bottles or
cans. The one-peice insert can be easily removed for
cleaning. An optional removable ashtray may be located
in one of the cupholders.
Rear Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the armrest
between the rear seats. Pull down the armrest to use the
cupholders.
Front Cupholders
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Bottle Holder
There are built-in bottle holders located in both rear door
trim panels.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Rear Cupholders Rear Bottle Holder
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
STORAGE
Glovebox Storage Compartment
The glovebox storage compartment is located on the right
side of the instrument panel. To open the glovebox, pull
outward on the latch handle located on the front of the
glovebox.
CONSOLE FEATURES
The center console is located between the front driver
and passenger seats. The center console armrest slides
forward from design position to provide added user
comfort. The center console can be used for storage and
is also equipped with an electrical power outlet. Refer to
“Power Outlets” in “Understanding The Feature of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Glovebox Storage Compartment
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dual Storage Bins
The center console contains both an upper and lower
storage bin. Lifting a latch at the front of the hinged
armrest provides access to these storage areas.
The lower bin can be accessed directly, without first
exposing the upper bin, by operating the right latch with
the armrest down.
The first storage bin can be used to hold smaller items.
Center Console Storage Console Detail
1 — Release Top Compartment
2 — Release Bottom Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
The lower storage bin includes a molded-in coin holder,
room for CD’s, DVD’s, and a power outlet that allows a
cellular phone to recharge while concealed.
NOTE:
•
A notch in the side of the console base under the
armrest will also allow use of cellular phone while still
plugged into the power outlet and with the armrest
latched down.
•
The power outlet located inside the console can also
energize the cigar lighter in the available Smoker’s
Package.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
tion, resulting in death or injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked
into position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
•
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve-
hicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier
objects as low and as far forward as possible. Place as
much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much
weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the
rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dan-
gerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
Ski Pass-Through
There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,
to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and
pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through
door.
Ski Pass-Through
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features ............... 186
䡵 Instrument Cluster .................... 187
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 188
䡵 Mini-Trip Computer — If Equipped ........ 201
▫ Control Buttons ..................... 202
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) – If Equipped.................... 203
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Displays ..................... 205
▫ Oil Change Required — If Equipped ...... 206
▫ Trip Functions ...................... 207
▫ Display Units In ..................... 208
▫ TirePsi ........................... 209
▫ Compass Display .................... 209
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) ....... 212
䡵 Setting The Analog Clock ................ 215
4
䡵 Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) .................. 215
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ...... 216
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 224
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ....... 226
▫ List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ......... 228
▫ Info Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ......... 228
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped ........................ 230
䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
If Equipped .......................... 234
▫ Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped . . . 234
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone)
— If Equipped ...................... 234
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) ......... 235
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 235
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 238
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 240
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 243
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC)................... 243
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 244
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 249
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 251
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 254
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 254
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped .......................... 255
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped ..... 259
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device ............................ 260
▫ Using This Feature ................... 261
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons ............. 261
▫ Play Mode ......................... 261
▫ List Or Browse Mode ................. 263
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) ........ 265
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls —
If Equipped .......................... 266
▫ Radio Operation ..................... 267
▫ CD Player ......................... 267
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance .............. 267
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones ....... 268
䡵 Climate Controls ...................... 268
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning ..... 268
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped .......................... 273
▫ Operating Tips ...................... 279
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Radio 11 — Storage Compartment
2 — Side Window Demister Outlet 7 — Passenger Airbag 12 — Climate Control
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Glove Compartment 13 — Trunk Release Button
4 — Ignition Switch 9 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped 14 — Power Outlet
5 — Analog Clock 10 — Hazard Switch
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading below the red area of the gauge shows
that the engine cooling system is operating properly. The
gauge pointer may show a higher than normal tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in
heavy stop and go traffic, or when towing a trailer.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is
located on the left side of the vehicle.
3. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
4. Speedometer
Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and
kilometers per hour (km/h).
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level drops to approximately 2.0 gal-
lons (7.6 Liters), the fuel symbol will light and a
single chime will sound.
NOTE: This light will remain on until a minimum of
approximately 3.0 gallons of fuel is added.
6. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on briefly when
the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s electrical devices,
such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster.
If the Charging System Light remains on, it means that
the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local
authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
7. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
8. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
9. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light will come on and remain on when the
ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON/RUN
position, and the light will turn off after the engine is
started. If the bulb does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.
This can be determined using the procedure shown in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
10. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine is critically hot, a warning chime
will sound 10 times. After the chime turns off, the
engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out.
11. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately three seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
12. Tachometer
The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
13. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
14. Odometer Display/Trip Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require
that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify
to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has
been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or
serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer
reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If
s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a
good idea for you to make a record of the odometer
reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure
that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is
accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odom-
eter, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then
push and hold the button until the display resets (ap-
proximately 2 seconds). Refer to “Trip Odometer Button”
for additional information.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the odometer will
display the following messages:
door .............................Door Ajar
dECK ............................ Trunk Ajar
LoW tirE.....................LowTirePressure
CHANgE OIL............... OilChange Required
gASCAP .......................Fuel Cap Fault
HOTOIL ............Transmission Oil Temperature
Exceeds Safe Threshold
NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the
optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
then warnings such as ”Low Tire,” “Door Ajar” and
“Trunk Ajar” will display in the EVIC. (Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for specific
messages).
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
cycles.
HOTOIL
When this message is displayed there is a transmission
over-temperature condition. When this condition occurs,
the “HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odom-
eter along with a chime.
NOTE: When this message is displayed, bring the
vehicle to a stop and idle the engine in park until the
message clears. Raising the idle of the engine slightly will
help speed up the cooling.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change
in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose,
improperly installed, or damaged, the words “gASCAP”
will display in the odometer display area. If this occurs,
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom-
eter reset button to turn off the “gASCAP” message.
(Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information). If
the problem continues, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer
service center as soon as possible.
CHANgE OIL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance) perform the following proce-
dure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
4. For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)”.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
15. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed
Control System is ON.
16. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
Dual Trip Odometer
Press and release this button to change the display from
odom eter to “Trip A.” Press and release it a second time
to change the display to “Trip B.” Press and release it a
third time to change the display back to the odometer.
To reset the trip odometer, first display the trip mileage
that you want to reset, “Trip A” or “Trip B.” Then push
and hold the button (approximately 2 seconds) until the
display resets to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in
Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.
17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. If the light remains
lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable and not need towing, however see your autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running you
may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and
increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may
require towing. Immediate service is required.
The light will come on when the ignition switch is first
turned on and remain on approximately 15 seconds as a
bulb check. This is normal. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
18. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the
driver.
20. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.
21. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
22. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
16 seconds when the alarm system is arming.
The light will begin to flash slowly indicating
that the system is armed. The light will stop
flashing when the vehicle is disarmed.
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped
This light monitors the ABS. This light will
come on when the ignition key is turned to the
ON/RUN position and may stay on for ap-
proximately three seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
on.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
Brakes.
The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to
assure that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key
to the on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light
should come on. If the light does not come on, have the
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
24. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
ON/RUN.
•
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that
monitors emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
mission control systems. The light will illuminate when
the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the key from
LOCK to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
28. High Beam Indicator
This light indicates that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer-
ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display — If Equipped
This display shows the EVIC messages when the appro-
priate conditions exist. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” for further information.
MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED
The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information
and temperature display.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
Control Buttons
STEP Button
Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to
scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip Func-
tions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B).
RESET Button
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position, then press and hold the RESET button
located on the steering wheel.
The following displays can be reset or changed:
•
Trip A
•
Trip B
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the STEP button on the instru-
ment cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Mini-Trip Control Buttons
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The EVIC consists of the following:
•
Compass Heading Display (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE,
SW)
•
Mileage (Avg/MPG)
•
Miles To Empty
•
Low Tire Information (Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) Displays) — if equipped
•
Timer
•
Units
•
System Warnings (Door Ajar, etc.)
•
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
•
Outside Temperature Display (°F or °C)
•
Audio Mode Displays – 12 preset Radio Stations or CD
Title and Track number when playing
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons on the instrument panel
switch bank located below the climate controls:
Press and release the MENU button to advance
the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu
features. Upon reaching the last item in the
Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first
item in the Main Menu with the next MENU
button press and release.
Press and release the DOWN button to advance
the display through the various Trip Functions
or Personal Settings.
Press and release the COMPASS button to
display the compass heading, the outside
temperature, and Audio Info (when the ra-
dio is on) screen when the current screen is
not the compass, outside temp, audio info
screen.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
MENU
Button
DOWN
Button
COMPASS
Button
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and release the SELECT Button to accept
a selection. The SELECT Button also resets
various Trip Functions.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime
after one mile traveled)
•
Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
•
RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Battery Low (with a
single chime)
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not In PARK
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle in Motion
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
•
Headlights On
•
Key In Ignition
•
Remote start aborted — Door ajar
•
Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
•
Remote start aborted — Trunk ajar
SELECT
Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
•
Remote start aborted — Fuel low
•
Remote start disabled — System fault
•
Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
•
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
•
Low Tire (with a graphic of the car showing which
tire(s) is/are low - with a single chime). Refer to ⬙Tire
Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operat-
ing⬙.
•
Check TPM System (with a single chime) Refer to ⬙Tire
Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙.
Oil Change Required — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
perform the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
•
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Distance To Empty
•
Elapsed Time
•
Display Units of Measure in
Press and release the DOWN button to advance the
display through the Trip Functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
•
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO indicator will illuminate in the EVIC display.
This ECO message will appear when you are driving in a
fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving
habits in order to increase fuel economy.
•
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read,
RESET or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history
information will be erased, and the averaging will con-
tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL”. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.
•
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
in the ON or START position.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently
displayed. Press and hold the SELECT button once to
clear the function currently displayed.
To reset all resettable functions, press and release the
SELECT button a second time within three seconds of
resetting the currently displayed function (Reset ALL will
display during this three-second window).
Display Units In
Press and release the MENU button until “Display Units
In” displays in the EVIC. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until ENGLISH or MET-
RIC appears.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire PSI
Press and release the MENU button until ⬙Tire PSI⬙ is
highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the SELECT
button and one of the following will be displayed:
•
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON.
•
If one or more tires have low pressure, ⬙Tire Pressure
LOW⬙ is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON.
•
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, ⬙Service
Tire Pressure System⬙ is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Press and release the MENU button to return to the
main menu.
Compass Display
The compass heading indicates the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight
compass heading and the outside tempera-
ture.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to calibrate the compass manually. When the ve-
hicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
EVIC will flash the “CAL” indicator until the compass is
calibrated. You may calibrate the compass by completing
COMPASS
Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
one or more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manu-
ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
compass:
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Calibrate
Compass Yes” displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button and the “CAL”
indicator will quit flashing.
5. Drive the vehicle slowly (under 5 mph / 8 km/h),
completing one or more circles (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns
off. The compass will now function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass head-
ing.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as
cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
panel. This is where the compass module is located and
such devices may interfere and cause false compass
readings.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the
shift lever in PARK.
2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Compass
Variance” and the current Variance Value displays in the
EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to increment the
Variance Value by one, (one button press per update),
until the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
NOTE: The Variance Values will wrap around from 15
back to 1. The Default Variance is Zone 8.
5. Press and release the MENU button to exit. Press the
DOWN button if you wish to calibrate the compass
manually (Refer to “Manual Compass Calibration”).
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
Press and release the DOWN button to display the
following programmable features:
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects
English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, or Dutch de-
pending on availability. As you continue, the displayed
information will be shown in the selected language.
Auto Unlock on Exit
When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position, all doors will unlock when the
driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press the
SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
RKE Unlock
When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When “All Doors 1st Press” is se-
lected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the SELECT button until “Driver
Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sound Horn with Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
Lock feature. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
Flash Lamps with Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the Sound Horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until ON or OFF appears.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
the SELECT button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds appears.
Headlights With Wipers
(Available with Auto Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press the SELECT button until ON or OFF
appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature.
To make your selection, press the SELECT button until
Off, 45 sec., 5 min., or 10 min. appears.
Illumin. Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
make your selection, press the SELECT button until
“OFF,” “30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating informa-
tion. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
Display ECO — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the EVIC, this message
can be turned on or off. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Display Units In
The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English
and Metric units of measure. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until “ENGLISH”
or “METRIC” appears.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock, located at the top center of the
instrument panel, press and hold the button in until the
setting is correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first and
then quicker the longer the button is held.
MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Media Center 230 (REQ)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —
If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command in the Uconnect™
User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues SoftR&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
•
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
•
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
•
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
•
Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
•
Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE:
•
The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
•
These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
•
VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
•
VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
•
VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
•
Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
•
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
For the radio, Refer to “Voice Command” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to “Video Entertainment System (VES)™” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) —
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures If Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —
If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions —
CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200
files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features If Your Vehicle”.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
an option with these radios.
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the center of the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
NOTE:
•
If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod威 or external USB device support capability.
•
Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is
located in the center of the instrument panel below the
climate controls.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
USB Connector Port
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
•
The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
•
The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
•
The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device)
Controlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
USB device and display data:
•
Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
•
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
•
Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
•
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
•
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
•
Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track⬙.
•
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
•
Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
•
Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 de-
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previ-
ous and next tracks.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
⬙Shuffle Off⬙.IftheRND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
•
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.
•
During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
•
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
external USB device.
•
Preset 1 – Playlists
•
Preset 2 – Artists
•
Preset 3 – Albums
•
Preset 4 – Genres
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
•
Preset 5 – Audiobooks
•
Preset 6 – Podcasts
•
Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
•
To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
•
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
•
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
CAUTION!
•
Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufactur-
er’s guidelines.
•
Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect™ phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the device
first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™ phone
system. Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect™
phone system, but just one can be selected and played.
Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
music on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
previous track music on your cellular phone.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
current song that is playing will display info.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different,
depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch op-
eration in each mode.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand switch
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
Manual Temperature Control
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ven-
tilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are four blower
speeds.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from sev-
eral patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the con-
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu-
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
temporarily put the system in recirculation
mode. This can be used when outside condi-
tions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause
the LED in the control button to illuminate. After ten
minutes, the system will return to normal mode function
and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
•
The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
•
Recirculated air is not allowed in Floor, Mix or Defrost
modes. If the Recirculation button is depressed while
in any of these modes, the LED indicator will flash
several times then go out. Recirculation will be dis-
abled automatically is these modes are selected.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
•
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to engage the Air
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures, while rotating right into
the red area indicates warmer tem-
peratures.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
•
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
•
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automati-
cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
Automatic Temperature Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
2. Dial in the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by rotating
the Temperature Control knob. Once
the comfort level is selected, the sys-
tem will maintain that level automati-
cally using the heating system. Should
the desired comfort level require air
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE:
•
The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
without affecting automatic operation.
•
Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
air conditioning is not necessary.
•
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
While operating in AUTO, the system will not auto-
matically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the
windshield. The defrost mode must be manually se-
lected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Blower Control
For full automatic operation or for
automatic blower operation, turn the
knob to the AUTO position. In manual
mode there are seven blower speeds
that can be individual selected. In off
position the blower will shut off.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-
ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
•
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
•
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
•
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
•
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
•
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
•
Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets selected with
the Mode control dial. Press this but-
ton a second time to turn OFF the air
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected.
•
Recirculation Control
The system will automatically control recircu-
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Control button will temporarily put the system
in recirculation mode. This can be used when
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause
the LED in the control button to illuminate. After ten
minutes, the system will return to normal AUTO mode
function and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
•
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
•
In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode
is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or Mix mode in order
to improve window clearing. Recirculation will be
disabled automatically if these modes are selected.
•
Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
Mix mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in
these modes will cause the LED in the control button
to blink and then turn off.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Mix and then press the
Recirculation button. This feature reduces the possibil-
ity of window fogging.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Mix
mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and
provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging be-
comes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle win-
dows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid
weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-
senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service
intervals.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures .................... 288
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 288
▫ Normal Starting ..................... 288
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C) ............... 289
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ................ 289
▫ After Starting ....................... 291
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........ 291
䡵 Automatic Transmission ................. 292
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
Systems ........................... 293
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ............. 293
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System ...... 294
▫ Four-Speed/Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission ....................... 294
▫ Gear Ranges ........................ 294
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped ............... 298
▫ Operation ......................... 298
5
▫ General Information .................. 299
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 300
▫ Acceleration ........................ 300
▫ Traction ........................... 300
䡵 Driving Through Water ................. 301
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ................. 301
▫ Shallow Standing Water ............... 301
䡵 Power Steering ....................... 303
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 304
䡵 Parking Brake ........................ 304
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............ 307
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System ........... 309
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 309
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ........... 309
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) .............. 310
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) – If Equipped ...... 311
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......... 313
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light ............ 315
䡵 Tire Safety Information ................. 316
▫ Tire Markings ....................... 316
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ......... 320
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ......... 321
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 322
䡵 Tires — General Information ............. 326
▫ Tire Pressure ....................... 326
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ................ 327
▫ Radial-Ply Tires ..................... 329
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped .............. 330
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped ........ 330
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped ............ 331
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped ......... 331
▫ Tire Spinning ....................... 332
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ................. 333
▫ Life Of Tire ........................ 333
▫ Replacement Tires .................... 334
䡵 Tire Chains .......................... 335
䡵 Snow Tires .......................... 335
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 336
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 337
▫ Base System ........................ 339
▫ Premium System – If Equipped .......... 341
▫ General Information .................. 345
䡵 Fuel Requirements ..................... 346
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ................ 346
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 347
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 347
▫ MMT In Gasoline .................... 348
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ............... 348
▫ Fuel System Cautions ................. 349
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............ 350
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
䡵 Flexible Fuel (3.6L Engine Only) —
If Equipped .......................... 350
▫ E-85 General Information ............... 350
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ................... 351
▫ Fuel Requirements ................... 352
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ...... 352
▫ Starting ........................... 353
▫ Cruising Range ...................... 353
▫ Replacement Parts ................... 353
▫ Maintenance ........................ 354
䡵 Adding Fuel ......................... 354
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .............. 354
▫ Loose Filler Cap Message .............. 356
䡵 Vehicle Loading ...................... 357
▫ Vehicle Certification Label .............. 357
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ...... 357
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ........ 357
▫ Overloading ........................ 358
▫ Loading ........................... 358
䡵 Trailer Towing ........................ 358
▫ Common Towing Definitions ............ 359
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 361
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ........ 362
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ............. 363
▫ Towing Requirements ................. 364
▫ Towing Tips ........................ 368
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 369
▫ Towing This Vehicle
Behind Another Vehicle ................ 369
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position,
and you must press the brake pedal before shifting out of
PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start (Four-Speed
Transmission), turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
For vehicles equipped with Tip Start (Six-Speed Trans-
mission), turn the ignition switch to the START position
and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
motor will continue to run, and it will disengage auto-
matically when the engine is running. If the engine fails
to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 sec-
onds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
Without Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the
engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have
enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15 sec-
onds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the
floor.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15-
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Ex-
treme Cold Weather” procedures.
With Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte-
grated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of
the vehicle.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warning effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift the shift lever into PARK only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Shift the shift lever into or out of REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and
the engine is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift the shift lever from REVERSE, PARK,
or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the
engine is above idle speed.
•
Before shifting the shift lever into any gear, make
sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting the shift lever out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
(Continued)
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should
always shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the
key from the ignition, and apply the parking
brake. Once the key is removed from the ignition,
the shift lever is locked in the PARK position,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
Furthermore, you should never leave children un-
attended inside a vehicle.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
Systems
These systems prevent the key fob from being removed
unless the shift lever is in PARK. They also prevent
shifting out of PARK unless the ignition switch is in the
ON or START position and the brake pedal is applied.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The key
can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition
is in the LOCK position. Once the key is removed, the
shift lever is locked in PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that
this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or
START position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Four-Speed/Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles/kilometers.
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.
Shift Lever
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever into
the PARK position first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the
ignition key in the ignition switch. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as
this can damage the drivetrain.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition switch to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
DRIVE – Six-Speed Transmission
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, use the AutoStick威
mode and select the appropriate gear when frequent
transmission shifting occurs in the DRIVE range. For
example: When operating the vehicle under heavy load-
ing conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
headwinds, or while towing heavy trailers). Under these
conditions, reducing shifting by selecting the appropriate
gear in AutoStick威 will improve the performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build-up.
DRIVE – Four-Speed Transmission
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving, it provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, select the ⬙3⬙ range
when frequent transmission shifting occurs while using
the DRIVE range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong headwinds, or while towing heavy
trailers). Under these conditions, using the ⬙3⬙ range will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE 3 — Four-Speed Transmission
This range eliminates shifts into fourth gear. The trans-
mission will operate normally in first and second gear.
Shifts into third gear may be delayed to provide second
gear operation at higher speeds. The ⬙3⬙ range should
also be used when descending steep grades to prevent
brake system distress
NOTE: Using the ⬙3⬙ range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build-up.
LOW — Four-Speed Transmission
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will
occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts
occur earlier than other gear range selections.
CAUTION!
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds
acceptable limits, the vehicle computer may override
the manually selected gear position by changing shift
points. This is done to prevent transmission damage
due to overheating.
Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission
The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor-
mal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transmission automatically shifts into sec-
ond gear (third gear for six–speed). The transmission
remains in second gear (third gear for six–speed) despite
the forward gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEU-
TRAL will continue to operate. The Reset feature allows
the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the shift lever into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
4. Restart the engine.
5. Shift the shift lever into the desired gear range and
resume driving.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, dealer service is
required.
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive feature providing
manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine brak-
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick威 position (below
the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side.
This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
gear being used. Moving the shift lever to the left (-)
triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The
gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the
transmission range indicator.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to
the right (+) or left (-).
AutoStick威 is deactivated when the shift lever is moved
from the AutoStick (+/-) position into the DRIVE
position.
General Information
•
You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except sixth.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
•
If a ratio other than first is selected, and the vehicle is
brought to a stop, the transmission control logic will
automatically select the first gear ratio.
•
Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions. To select second gear after the vehicle is
brought to a stop, tap the shift lever to the right (+)
once.
•
Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is en-
gaged.
•
The transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick威 is
engaged.
•
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick威 is engaged.
•
If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed,
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
Mostly the transmission will stay in the manually
selected ratio, however.
•
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
•
If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStick威 mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
•
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
•
Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
•
Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” moni-
tors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb
repaired as soon as possible.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake
(ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required. See your authorized dealer.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related
motor noises. These noises are the system performing its
self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working
properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is
started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
•
brake pedal pulsations,
•
and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad-
vanced electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System
(TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work
together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari-
ous driving conditions and are commonly referred to as
ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section of this manual.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
•
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
•
The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
•
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Start Assist (HSA) – If Equipped
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in
launching a vehicle on an incline. HSA will maintain the
level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short
duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short duration, the system will release brake pressure
and the vehicle will roll down the incline. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of
throttle applied.
During operation, HSA will activate the brake control
system and a clicking noise may occur. If your foot is on
the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight
pedal movement. The clicking and pedal movement is
normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•
Vehicle must be stopped
•
Vehicle must be on a 7% or greater incline
•
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
7%), with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer
where the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, which could cause a collision with an-
other vehicle or object. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
The system will only work if the intended direction of the
vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the intended
direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE
and the activation criteria are met, HSA will activate.
The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears,
and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in
NEUTRAL.
HSA Off
Non-EVIC Equipped Vehicles
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow this
procedure:
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within
90 seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Release the clutch pedal.
6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
7. Press the “ESC Off” switch four times within 20 sec-
onds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
should turn on and turn off two times.
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional half-turn to the right.
9.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
EVIC Equipped Vehicles
HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC
equipped vehicle. If you wish to turn off the HSA feature,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-
acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to deter-
mine the vehicle path intended by the driver and com-
pares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition
•
Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
ESC Operating Modes
All ESC equipped vehicles can choose the following ESC
operating modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for almost all driving situa-
tions. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for
specific reasons as noted below.
Partial ESC Mode
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch (located in the lower switch bank below the
heater/air conditioning controls). When in “Partial Off”
mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled
and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC
function normally, with the exception of engine power
reduction. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle
is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more
wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to
gain traction.
ESC Off Switch
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
WARNING!
In partial ESC mode, the engine power reduction
feature of ESC is disabled. Therefore, enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is re-
duced.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa-
tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC on again by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information Placard
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and
Wheel – If Equipped
The spare tire of your vehicle is equivalent in look and
function as the original equipment tire and wheel found
on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your
vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original
equipment tire and wheel, refer to the recommended tire
rotation pattern in “Tire Rotation Recommendations” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip-
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempo-
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo-
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use.
Do not install more than one non-matching temporary
use spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T,S=Temporary Spare Tire
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. Do
not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel on
the vehicle at any given time
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or icy conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low temperature
effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recom-
mended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illumi-
nates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recom-
mended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The
system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.”
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
message will be displayed for a minimum of five
seconds and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low
in one or more of the four active road tires. Should this
occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” and ⬙LOW
TIRE⬙ message will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when
a system fault is detected. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn ON and a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will be dis-
played for a minimum of five seconds.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values flashing.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate all tires with low pressure (those flashing in
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash-
ing, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, a chime will sound and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ mes-
sage is then followed with a graphic display with pres-
sure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure
values are still being received from the TPM sensors but
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
The system still needs to be serviced as long as the
⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have
a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “Tire Pressure
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a chime will
sound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure
value in the graphic display.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a
⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid,
and the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure
value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States ................... KR5S18002015B
Canada........................267T-S180015B
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold driveability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-
nia reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
•
Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
E-85 Fuel Cap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that
alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be
avoided.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
•
you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than 1/4 full
•
you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
•
you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
•
When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C),
you may experience hard starting and rough idle
following start up even if the above recommendations
are followed.
•
Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer re-
quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera-
ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear
quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
surface.
Fuel Filler Door
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
(Continued)
Tether Cable
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and doing so may cause the MIL to turn on.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Filler Cap Message
If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off
the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice
in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the
problem will turn the MIL off.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear
of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing
this section, please consult your dealer to for full details
on the towing capabilities of the vehicle.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than or more than 10% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings
Engine/Transmission Max. Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note 1)
2.4L/Auto See Note 2 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
3.6L/Auto 22 sq.ft. (2.0 sq.m) 2,000 lbs (900 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Note 1: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer
to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Note 2: Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front shields/guards are not recommended for use with
all four-cylinder engines with automatic transmission. Please see your authorized dealer for additional infor-
mation.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended
frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or
cause severe engine damage under extreme condi-
tions.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause
the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause
loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load
trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and
Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operat-
ing” for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Incorrect trailer tongue weight could result in in-
creased yaw or vehicle instability. A negative trailer
tongue weight could unload the rear suspension of
the tow vehicle decreasing vehicle stability. Negative
trailer tongue weight could cause the trailer to squat
and potentially become disengaged from the tow
vehicle resulting in a runaway trailer condition.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
•
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
WARNING! (Continued)
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve 10% of trailer tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements – Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
•
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for informa-
tion on tread wear indicators and for proper inspection
procedure.
•
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for proper tire replacement
procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carry-
ing capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes with adequate
braking capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for ad-
ditional space between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in a collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working
properly — including hazard flashers.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, third
gear for a four-speed automatic and the fifth gear for a
six-speed AutoStick威 should be selected.
NOTE: Using third or fifth instead of DRIVE while
operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions,
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. This
action will also provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 min-
utes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer tow-
ing.” Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Check the four-speed automatic transmission
fluid level before towing. The AutoStick威 six-speed trans-
mission is sealed and the fluid level cannot be checked.
See your authorized dealership service center for
assistance.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
•
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
•
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
•
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
•
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Recreational towing is not allowed.
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive-
train will result.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers ................ 372
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats ................ 372
▫ Engine Oil Overheating
(2.4L Engine Only) — If Equipped ........ 373
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 374
▫ Jack Location ....................... 374
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ................... 374
▫ Preparations For Jacking ............... 375
▫ Jacking Instructions ................... 376
䡵 Jump-Starting ........................ 381
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ............. 382
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ............... 384
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 386
䡵 Shift Lever Override ................... 387
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 388
▫ Without The Ignition Key .............. 390
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — Slow down.
•
In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle,
when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. After
appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
and call for service.
372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Oil Overheating (2.4L Engine Only) —
If Equipped
During sustained high-speed driving or trailer tow up
long grades on a hot day, the engine oil temperature may
become too hot. If this happens, the “HOTOIL” message
flashes in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be
reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) until the engine oil
temperature is reduced.
NOTE: The vehicle speed is reduced to a maximum of
53 mph (85 km/h). You may of course, reduce your
vehicle speed further if needed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
•
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the trunk.
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the trunk.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
Spare Tire and Jack Stowage
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of
Tires--General Information--for information about the
spare tire, its use, and operation.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in Step 3.
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. There is a front and rear jacking location on each side
of the vehicle.
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the wheel nuts, and pull the wheel and wheel
covers (where applicable) off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
•
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in personal injury.
•
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the
wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any
sharp edges.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts, until
380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut
torque is 100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area and have
the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
the tire pressure as required.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
shield. To allow jump-starting there are remote battery
posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Locking Tab
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi-
tive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE. Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure
to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels, is most effective.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), turn the system to Partial OFF
before attempting to “rock” the vehicle. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Brake Control” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
CAUTION!
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the cupholder liner.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position without
starting the engine.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the hole at the
front of the cupholder and push and hold the override
lever forward.
6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the cupholder liner.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
•
Trans in NEUTRAL
•
25 mph (40 km/h)max speed
•
15 mi (24 km) max distance
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear
Front OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
•
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
•
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
•
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
•
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position, not
the LOCK or ACC positions.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
sion is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following condi-
tions:
•
The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
•
The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 mi
(24 km).
•
The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
mi (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels OFF
the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or
wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such dam-
age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flatbed towing is
the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed
towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equip-
ment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels on
the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage will
occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the front
wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper towing
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these towing methods could result
in damage to the transmission. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.4L ............. 393
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.6L ............. 394
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ...... 395
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 395
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 396
䡵 Replacement Parts ..................... 397
䡵 Dealer Service ........................ 398
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ................. 398
▫ Engine Oil ......................... 399
▫ Engine Oil Filter ..................... 402
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 403
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 403
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 405
▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped ............ 406
▫ Body Lubrication .................... 407
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 408
7
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ................. 409
▫ Exhaust System ..................... 409
▫ Cooling System ..................... 412
▫ Brake System ....................... 417
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 419
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 422
▫ Cleaning Center Console Cupholders ...... 428
䡵 Fuses .............................. 428
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module ......... 428
䡵 Vehicle Storage ....................... 433
䡵 Replacement Bulbs .................... 434
䡵 Bulb Replacement ..................... 434
▫ High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps (HID) .................... 434
▫ Front Turn Signal .................... 435
▫ Front Fog Lamp ..................... 435
▫ Backup Lamps ...................... 436
▫ License Plate Lamp ................... 437
䡵 Fluid Capacities ...................... 438
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts ....... 439
▫ Engine ............................ 439
▫ Chassis ........................... 440
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “GASCAP” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap
until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that
the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
“Reset” button to turn off the message. If the problem
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” Resolv-
ing the problem will turn the MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range mark-
ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one
quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the
range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of
the range marking.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recom-
mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 2.4L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating
temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oils
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and it’s performance may be im-
paired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are high quality and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind
the left front fender and is accessible without removing
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located
in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to
_Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the inner fender shield.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, and Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter – If Equipped
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C Air Filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-
place the filter:
1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the
door.
3. Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot
on the side of the box. This is done by grasping the
dampener connector (on the outside of the box) and the
end of the connector pin (on the inside of the box) with
your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while
lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand.
Once disconnected, the dampener will retract under-
neath the instrument panel if you release it.
4. Pivot the glove box downward.
5. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
7. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C Air Filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to install the filter properly will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
A/C Air Filter Replacement
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Make sure that they are not frozen to the
glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the
blade.
Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum
products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located
in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at anytime the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before replace-
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
Four-Cylinder Engines – the coolant bottle provides a
quick visual method for determining that the engine
coolant (antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine
idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown
on the bottle.
Six-Cylinder Engines – the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the pressurized coolant bottle should be
between the “COLD” and “FULL” range on the bottle
when the engine is cold.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing cool-
ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month. When addi-
tional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser-
voir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylin-
der reservoir.
(Continued)
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and the fluid.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is
important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the
prescribed level using the recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will require
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Level Check – 2.4L Engine
Use the following procedure to check the automatic
transmission fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of
60 seconds.
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi-
tion ending with the lever in PARK.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate
the possibility of dirt entering the transmission.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180° F (82° C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is
driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held
comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a
temperature below 80° F (27° C).
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then,
remove dipstick and note the reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the
filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
overfill.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
CAUTION!
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will require more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
•
Dirt and water in the transmission can cause
serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from
entering the transmission after checking or replen-
ishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is
re-seated properly.
Fluid Level Check – 3.6L Engine
The automatic transmission has no dipstick and is dealer
serviced only.
Transmission Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap, and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equiva-
lent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure –
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equiva-
lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning Center Console Cupholders
Removal
Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift
upward.
Cleaning
Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium
hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.
Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull
the liner from the water and dip it back into the water
about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris.
Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer
surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This
center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label
that identifies each component may be printed on the
inside of the cover. Refer to the graphic below for
FUSES/TIPM location.
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
1
40 Amp
Green
—
Power Top Module –
If Equipped
2—
20 Amp
Yellow
AWD Module
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
3—
10 Amp
Red
Center High
Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL)/Brake
Switch
4—
10 Amp
Red
Ignition Switch
5—
20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow – If
Equipped
6—
10 Amp
Red
Power Mirror
Switch/Climate Con-
trols
7—
30 Amp
Green
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Sense 1
8—
30 Amp
Green
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Sense 2
Totally Integrated Power Module
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
9
40 Amp
Green
Battery Feed – Power
Seats – If Equipped/
PZEV Air Pump – If
Equipped
10 —
20 Amp
Yellow
Instrument Panel/
Power Locks/Interior
Lights
11 —
15 Amp
Lt Blue
Selectable Power
Outlet (Inside Center
Arm Rest)
12 —
20 Amp
Yellow
—
13 —
20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition
14 —
10 Amp
Red
Instrument Panel
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
15
40 Amp
Green
— Radiator Fan Relay
16 —
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Cigar Lighter/
Sunroof – If
Equipped
17 —
10 Amp
Red
Wireless Control
Module (WCM)/
Clock/Steering Con-
trol Module (SCM)
18
40 Amp
Green
—
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay
19 —
20 Amp
Yellow
Audio Amplifier – If
Equipped
20 —
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Radio
21 —
10 Amp
Red
Siren – If Equipped
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
22 —
10 Amp
Red
Ignition Run – Cli-
mate Controls/Hot
Cupholder – If
Equipped
23 —
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay 3
24 —
25 Amp
Natural
Sunroof – If
Equipped
25 —
10 Amp
Red
Ignition Run —
Heated Mirrors - If
Equipped
26 —
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay 2
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
27 —
10 Amp
Red
Ignition Run – Occu-
pant Classification
Module (OCM)/
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
28 —
10 Amp
Red
Ignition Run — Oc-
cupant Classification
Module (OCM)/
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
29 — —
Hot Car (No Fuse
Required)
30 —
20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Run –
Heated Seats – If
Equipped
31 —
10 Amp
Red
Headlamp Washer –
If Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
32
30 Amp
Pink
—
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay 1
33 —
10 Amp
Red
Switch Bank/
Diagnostic Link
Connector/
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
34
30 Amp
Pink
—
Anti-Lock Brakes
(ABS) Module – If
Equipped/Electronic
Stability Control
(ESC) Module – If
Equipped
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
35
40 Amp
Green
—
Anti-Lock Brakes
(ABS) Module – If
Equipped/Electronic
Stability Control
(ESC) Module – If
Equipped
36
30 Amp
Pink
—
Passenger Door Mod-
ule (PDM)/Driver
Door Module (DDM)
37 —
25 Amp
Natural
Power Top Module –
If Equipped
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Totally Integrated Power
Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the Totally
Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
•
Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
•
Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb No.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lamp .......... 578/W5W
Center Courtesy/Reading Lamp..........578/W5W
Visor Vanity Lamp......................A6220
Glove Box Lamp .......................A6220
Shift Indicator Lamp .................IKLE14140
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp .............579
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior Bulb No.
Bi-Halogen Headlamp .................... HIR2
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp................ 3157NAK
Front Park Lamp . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp ......................... H11
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp ..... LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp ................. LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp ........................... 921
License Lamp.......................... W5W
BULB REPLACEMENT
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID)
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Front Turn Signal
1. Raise and prop open the hood.
2. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp
housing.
3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Access to the lamps through the lower fascia
cutout is limited. We recommend you access the lamps by
turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove
the inner fender shield.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
1. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp hous-
ing.
2. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog
lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Backup Lamps
1. Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner
behind the tail lamp.
2. Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the tail lamp
housing.
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly outward pushing
on the studs from inside to disengage the lamp housing.
NOTE: Placing a small flat head screwdriver or similar
tool between the lamp outboard ball stud and plastic
grommet from inside the trunk can assist in lamp re-
moval.
4. Twist and remove socket from lamp.
5. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
License Plate Lamp
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on
the lamp assembly for removal.
2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp
assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines — (Except 2.4L PZEV) 16.9 Gallons 64 Liters
2.4L PZEV (Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.4 Liters
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
7.7 Quarts 7.3 Liters
3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
11.6 Quarts 11 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine except
PZEV*
ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Spark Plugs – 2.4L with PZEV* ZFR5AP (Gap 0.031 in [0.8 mm])
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane
* PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Brake Master Cylinder
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-
nated.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 443
Once A Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
444 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 445
24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
446 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 447
56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km)
whichever comes first.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 449
88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
96,000 miles (156 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.6L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV Valve if necessary. †
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
450 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 451
120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid
and filter(s).
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
452 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 453
152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
454 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 455
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle.............................. 459
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ........... 459
▫ Prepare A List ...................... 459
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 459
䡵 If You Need Assistance ................. 459
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 460
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 460
▫ In Mexico Contact .................... 460
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 461
▫ Service Contract ..................... 461
䡵 Warranty Information .................. 462
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts ....................... 462
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ................ 462
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 462
▫ In Canada ......................... 463
䡵 Publication Order Forms ................ 463
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 459
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247–9753
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
460 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 461
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
462 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 463
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
464 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 465
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
466 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes ....................... 304
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) .............. 307
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 413
Adding Fuel ........................... 354
Adding Washer Fluid .....................409
Additives, Fuel ......................... 348
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 403
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............... 405
Air Conditioning ........................ 268
Air Conditioning Controls .................268
Air Conditioning Filter .................280,406
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............405,406
Air Conditioning System ............. 268,273,405
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............281
Air Pressure, Tires ....................... 327
Airbag .............................. 57,67
Airbag Deployment ....................... 68
Airbag Light ................... 65,66,70,85,189
Airbag Maintenance .......................69
Airbag, Side ......................61,64,66,67
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ...........62,64,67
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ............18,196
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............. 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ................231,256
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............. 307
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................307
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........18
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .............. 413,438
Disposal ...........................415
Appearance Care ........................422
Ashtray ...............................174
Assistance Towing ....................... 111
Auto Down Power Windows ................35
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................32
Auto Up Power Windows .................. 36
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 94
Automatic Door Locks ................... 31,32
Automatic Oil Change Indicator ..........194,206
468 INDEX
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .........273
Automatic Transaxle .............. 12,288,292,419
Adding Fluid .................. 421,422,440
Filter .............................422
Fluid and Filter Changes ............... 422
Fluid Level Check .................421,422
Interlock System .................. 293,294
Reset Mode ......................... 297
Selection Of Lubricant .................440
Shifting ...........................292
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Type .........................420
Special Additives ..................... 420
Autostick ............................. 298
B-Pillar Location ........................322
Battery ............................... 403
Jump Starting ........................30
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 25
Location ........................... 403
Belts, Seat .............................. 85
Body Mechanism Lubrication ............... 407
Brake Assist System ......................310
Brake System ........................... 417
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..................... 307
Fluid Check ..................... 417,440
Master Cylinder .....................417
Parking ........................... 304
Warning Light ....................... 190
Brake, Parking ..........................304
Brake/Transaxle Interlock .................. 294
Brakes ...............................417
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........83
Bulb Replacement ....................... 434
Bulbs, Light ..........................87,434
Calibration, Compass .....................210
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ......... 20
10
INDEX 469
Capacities, Fluid ........................438
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..............................354
Oil (Engine) .....................393,401
Power Steering ...................... 304
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .............414
Car Washes ............................423
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............84,350
Cellular Phone ........................ 97,268
Chains, Tire ............................ 335
Changing A Flat Tire ..................... 374
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................ 318
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ............... 396
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............84
Checks, Safety ........................... 84
Child Restraint .................... 72,73,78,81
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............76,78
Child Safety Locks ........................33
Cigar Lighter ...........................174
Clean Air Gasoline .......................346
Cleaning
Wheels ............................425
Windshield Wiper Blades ...............408
Climate Control .........................268
Clock ........................ 215,217,236,245
Coin Holder ........................... 176
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ............. 267
Compact Spare Tire ......................330
Compass ...........................201,209
Compass Calibration ..................... 210
Compass Variance ....................... 210
Computer, Trip/Travel ..................20,207
Connector
UCI .............................. 259
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .......259
Console ............................ 144,176
Console, Floor ....................... 144,176
470 INDEX
Contract, Service ........................ 461
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .......... 414
Cooling System ......................... 412
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............413
Coolant Capacity .....................438
Coolant Level .................... 412,415
Disposal of Used Coolant ............... 415
Drain, Flush, and Refill ................ 412
Inspection .......................... 415
Points to Remember .................. 416
Pressure Cap ........................414
Radiator Cap ....................... 414
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ....413,438,439
Corrosion Protection .....................422
Crankcase Ventilation Module ............... 20
Cruise Light ...........................195
Cupholders ...................... 144,174,428
Customer Assistance .....................459
Customer Programmable Features ............212
Data Recorder, Event ...................... 71
Daytime Running Lights ................... 150
Dealer Service ..........................398
Deck Lid, Power Release ................... 38
Defroster, Rear Window ................... 181
Defroster, Windshield ................86,271,277
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ............... 30,154
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................395
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................. 149
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle ............... 421,422
Oil (Engine) ........................399
Power Steering ...................... 304
Disabled Vehicle Towing ...................388
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............. 415
Engine Oil ......................... 402
Door Locks, Automatic .................... 31
Door Opener, Garage .....................160
10
INDEX 471
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ..................300
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ......................301
E-85 Fuel .............................350
Electric Rear Window Defrost ............... 181
Electric Remote Mirrors ....................95
Electrical Power Outlets ................... 170
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......157
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .............313
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ....203
Emergency Trunk Release ................... 39
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking ............................374
Jump Starting ....................... 381
Towing ............................388
Emission Control System Maintenance .........396
Engine ...............................393
Air Cleaner .........................403
Block Heater ........................291
Break-In Recommendations ..............83
Checking Oil Level ...................399
Compartment .......................394
Compartment Identification .............394
Coolant (Antifreeze) ................ 412,439
Cooling ...........................412
Exhaust Gas Caution ................ 84,350
Fails to Start ........................ 289
Flooded, Starting ..................... 289
Fuel Requirements .................346,438
Jump Starting ....................... 381
Oil ......................... 399,438,439
Oil Change Interval .............194,206,400
Oil Filler Cap .................... 393,401
Oil Filter ...........................402
Oil Filter Disposal .................... 402
472 INDEX
Oil Selection .....................400,438
Oil Synthetic ........................ 402
Overheating ........................ 372
Starting ...........................288
Temperature Gauge ................... 188
Engine Oil Viscosity ......................401
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .......... 68
Entry System, Illuminated .................. 20
Ethanol ............................... 347
Event Data Recorder ...................... 71
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................84,350
Exhaust System .......................84,409
Extender, Seat Belt ........................ 57
Exterior Lights ..........................87
Fabric Care ............................426
Filler Location Fuel .................... 188,354
Filters
Air Cleaner .........................403
Air Conditioning .................. 280,406
Automatic Transaxle ..................422
Engine Oil ....................... 402,439
Engine Oil Disposal ................... 402
Flash-To-Pass ........................... 149
Flashers ..............................372
Hazard Warning ..................... 372
Turn Signal ....................... 87,436
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ......................353
Engine Oil ......................... 352
Fuel Requirements .................350,352
Maintenance ........................354
Replacement Parts ....................353
Starting ...........................353
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 289
Floor Console .......................... 176
10
INDEX 473
Fluid Capacities ......................... 438
Fluid Leaks .............................87
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle ............... 421,422
Brake .......................... 417,440
Cooling System ......................412
Engine Oil ......................... 399
Power Steering ................... 304,440
Fluids ................................ 439
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .......... 439
Fog Light Service ........................435
Fog Lights .......................150,196,435
Folding Rear Seat ..................... 143,144
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................... 386
Fuel ................................. 346
Adding ...........................354
Additives ..........................348
Clean Air .......................... 346
Ethanol ...........................347
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ............... 188,354
Filler Door (Gas Cap) .................. 188
Gasoline ........................... 346
Gauge ............................ 188
Light ............................. 189
Materials Added .....................348
Methanol ..........................347
Octane Rating ....................346,439
Requirements ....................346,438
Tank Capacity .......................438
Fuel System Caution .....................355
Fuel, Flexible ........................... 350
Fueling ...............................354
Fuses ................................ 428
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ........... 160
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............ 354,356,395
474 INDEX
Gasoline, Clean Air ...................... 346
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................346
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .................. 188
Fuel ..............................188
Odometer .......................... 192
Tachometer .........................192
Gear Ranges ...........................294
Gear Select Lever Override ................. 387
Gearshift .............................. 294
General Information ................. 17,127,345
General Maintenance ..................... 398
Glass Cleaning .......................... 427
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............357,360
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .............357,359
GVWR ...............................357
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) .............. 97
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ......................301
Hazard Warning Flasher ................... 372
Head Restraints .........................138
Headlights ............................ 434
Cleaning ...........................425
High Beam ...................... 149,201
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ......149
On With Wipers .....................156
Passing ............................ 149
Switch ............................ 147
Heated Seats ...........................134
Heater ...............................268
Heater, Engine Block ..................... 291
10
INDEX 475
Hitches
Trailer Towing .......................361
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 160
Hood Prop ............................ 146
Hood Release .......................... 145
Ignition ...............................12
Key ............................... 12
Lock ..............................12
Ignition Key Removal .....................12
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................... 15
Infant Restraint ........................72,73
Information Center, Vehicle ................. 203
Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 93
Instrument Cluster .................... 187,188
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............186
Instrument Panel Cover ................... 426
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............427
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............ 428
Interior Appearance Care ..................426
Interior Lights ..........................151
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........154
Introduction ............................. 4
Jack Location ...........................374
Jack Operation ....................... 374,376
Jacking Instructions ...................... 376
Jump Starting .......................... 381
Key-In Reminder ......................... 14
Key, Programming ........................16
Key, Replacement ........................16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................15
Keyless Entry System ......................20
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) ................ 20
Keys .................................12
Knee Bolster ............................57
476 INDEX
Lane Change and Turn Signals ...........196,436
Lane Change Assist ...................... 149
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................43
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) ....... 78
Latches ................................87
Hood ............................. 145
Lead Free Gasoline ...................... 346
Leaks, Fluid ............................ 87
Life of Tires ............................ 333
Light Bulbs ..........................87,434
Lights .............................. 87,146
Airbag ....................65,66,70,85,189
Back-Up ...........................436
Brake Assist Warning ..................315
Brake Warning ...................... 190
Bulb Replacement ....................434
Daytime Running .................... 150
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 315
Engine Temperature Warning ............ 190
Exterior ............................ 87
Fog .........................150,196,435
Headlight Switch ..................... 147
Headlights ......................147,434
Headlights On With Wipers ............. 156
High Beam Indicator ..................201
Illuminated Entry .....................20
Instrument Cluster ................... 147
Interior ............................ 151
License ............................ 437
Lights On Reminder ..................150
Low Fuel ..........................189
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......199
Map Reading ....................... 151
Oil Pressure ........................190
Passing ............................ 149
Seat Belt Reminder ................... 189
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) .............18
10
INDEX 477
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ............196
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ....... 198,337
Traction Control ..................... 315
Turn Signal .............. 87,148,196,435,436
Voltage ............................189
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 188
Loading Vehicle ...................... 357,358
Capacities .......................... 358
Tires ..............................322
Locks
Auto Unlock ......................... 32
Automatic Door ...................... 31
Child Protection ...................... 33
Power Door ......................... 31
Low Tire Pressure System ..................337
Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH) ....................... 78
Lubrication, Body ....................... 407
Lumbar Support ........................138
Maintenance Free Battery ..................403
Maintenance Procedures ...................398
Maintenance Schedule .................... 442
Maintenance, General ..................... 398
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 199,396
Manual, Service .........................463
Map/Reading Lights .....................151
Master Cylinder (Brakes) .................. 417
Methanol .............................347
Mini-Trip Computer ................... 201,207
Mirrors ................................93
Automatic Dimming ...................94
Electric Powered ...................... 95
Outside ............................96
Rearview ...........................93
Vanity .............................96
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............. 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............337
Mopar Parts .........................397,462
478 INDEX
MTBE/ETBE ...........................347
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 83
Occupant Restraints ..................... 64,68
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ......... 39,61,62,64,67
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............346
Odometer .............................192
Trip ...........................192,195
Oil Change Indicator ..................194,206
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..............194,206
Oil Filter, Change ........................402
Oil Filter, Selection ....................... 402
Oil Pressure Light ....................... 190
Oil, Engine .........................399,439
Capacity ........................... 438
Change Interval ................ 194,206,400
Checking .......................... 399
Dipstick ...........................399
Disposal ...........................402
Filter ..........................402,439
Filter Disposal .......................402
Identification Logo ................... 400
Materials Added to ................... 402
Recommendation .................. 400,438
Synthetic .......................... 402
Viscosity ........................401,438
Onboard Diagnostic System .............. 395,396
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ...........160
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Overdrive ............................. 296
Overheating, Engine ...................... 372
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 4,463
Paint Care ............................. 422
Panic Alarm ............................ 25
Parking Brake .......................... 304
Passing Light ........................... 149
10
INDEX 479
Personal Settings ........................212
Pets ..................................83
Phone, Cellular ..........................97
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) ..............97
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 322
Power
Deck Lid Release .....................38
Door Locks ......................... 31
Mirrors ............................95
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........170
Seats ............................. 132
Steering ........................303,304
Sunroof ........................... 167
Windows ...........................34
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............57
Preparation for Jacking .................... 375
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ........................... 51
Programmable Electronic Features ............212
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 25
Radial Ply Tires .........................329
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......... 414
Radio Operation ........................ 268
Radio Remote Controls ....................266
Rear Cupholder ......................... 175
Rear Seat, Folding ....................143,144
Rear Window Defroster ................... 181
Rear Window Features .................... 181
Rearview Mirrors ........................93
Recorder, Event Data ...................... 71
Recreational Towing ...................... 369
Reformulated Gasoline .................... 346
Refrigerant ............................ 406
Reminder, Seat Belt .....................55,56
480 INDEX
Remote Control
Door Locks ......................... 20
Security Alarm .......................18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................20
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) ...............20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........266
Remote Starting System .................... 27
Remote Trunk Release .....................38
Replacement Bulbs .......................434
Replacement Keys ........................ 16
Replacement Parts .......................397
Replacement Tires ....................... 334
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 462
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ...........194,206
Restraint, Head .........................138
Restraints, Child ......................... 72
Restraints, Infant ......................... 73
Rotation, Tires ..........................336
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................85
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............87
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................462
Safety Information, Tire ................... 316
Safety Tips ............................. 84
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................84
Satellite Radio Antenna .................231,256
Schedule, Maintenance ....................442
Seat Belt Maintenance ....................427
Seat Belt Reminder .....................55,56
Seat Belts .............................. 85
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ................48
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......48
And Pregnant Women .................. 57
Child Restraint ..................... 72,81
Extender ...........................57
Front Seat ......................... 43,44
Inspection .......................... 85
Operating Instructions .................. 44
10
INDEX 481
Pretensioners ........................51
Rear Seat ...........................43
Reminder ..........................189
Untwisting Procedure .................. 47
Seat Belts (Sedan) ........................ 39
Seats .................................132
Adjustment ......................... 136
Cleaning ...........................144
Heated ............................134
Lumbar Support ..................... 138
Power ............................132
Rear Folding ..................... 143,144
Reclining ..........................137
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........413,439
Selection of Oil ......................... 400
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................... 15
Sentry Key Programming ................... 16
Service Assistance ....................... 459
Service Contract ......................... 461
Service Manuals ........................ 463
Setting the Clock ................ 215,217,236,245
Settings, Personal ........................212
Shift Lever Override ...................... 387
Shifting
Automatic Transaxle ..................292
Shoulder Belts ........................... 43
Side Airbag ............................. 66
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) .......... 280
Signals, Turn .........................87,436
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ............... 300
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ................. 335
Snow Tires ............................ 335
Spare Tire ....................... 330,331,374
Specifications
Oil ...............................400
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...........157,195
Speedometer ...........................188
482 INDEX
Starting ............................... 288
Engine Fails to Start ..................289
Starting and Operating .................... 288
Starting Procedures ......................288
Steering
Power .......................... 303,304
Tilt Column ........................ 156
Wheel, Tilt .........................156
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .............. 266
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls ......................... 266
Storage ............................176,433
Storage, Vehicle .........................279
Stuck, Freeing .......................... 386
Sun Roof .............................. 167
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........57
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................402
Tachometer ............................192
Taillights .............................. 436
Telescoping Steering Column ...............156
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........ 273
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......188,372
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ............... 76
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................18
Theft System (Security Alarm) ...............18
Tilt Steering Column ..................... 156
Time Delay, Headlight .................... 148
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........322
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............320
Tire Markings .......................... 316
Tire Safety Information .................... 316
Tires ............................ 87,326,465
Aging (Life of Tires) .................. 333
Air Pressure ........................326
Chains ............................ 335
Changing .......................... 374
10
INDEX 483
Compact Spare ......................330
General Information ..................326
High Speed ......................... 328
Inflation Pressures .................... 327
Jacking ............................374
Life of Tires ........................ 333
Load Capacity ....................322,323
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .........337
Pressure Warning Light ................ 198
Quality Grading ..................... 465
Radial ............................329
Replacement ........................ 334
Rotation ...........................336
Safety .......................... 316,326
Sizes ............................. 318
Snow Tires .........................335
Spare Tire .......................... 374
Spinning ...........................332
Tread Wear Indicators ................. 333
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .............. 363
Towing ............................... 358
24-Hour Towing Assistance .............. 111
Disabled Vehicle .....................388
Guide .............................362
Recreational ........................369
Weight ............................ 362
Towing Assistance .......................111
Traction .............................. 300
Trailer Towing .......................... 358
Cooling System Tips .................. 369
Hitches ............................361
Minimum Requirements ................364
Trailer and Tongue Weight ..............363
Trailer Towing Guide ..................... 362
Trailer Weight .......................... 362
Transaxle
Automatic .................. 12,288,292,419
Autostick .......................... 298
484 INDEX
Filter .............................422
Maintenance ........................419
Operation .......................... 292
Overdrive .......................... 296
Selection of Lubricant .................440
Transmission ...........................292
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 25
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 160
Transporting Pets ........................83
Tread Wear Indicators ....................333
Trip Computer ..........................201
Trip Odometer ..........................192
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................195
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ......................38
Trunk Release Remote Control ...............38
Trunk Release, Emergency .................. 39
Turn Signals ......................148,196,436
UCI Connector ......................... 259
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) .............. 97
Understanding Your Instrument Panel ......... 186
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 465
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 259
Universal Transmitter ..................... 160
Unleaded Gasoline .......................346
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .............. 47
Upholstery Care ........................ 426
Vanity Mirrors ........................... 96
Variance, Compass ....................... 210
Vehicle Certification Label ................. 357
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ................... 323,357,358
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .............. 7
Vehicle Storage ....................... 279,433
10
INDEX 485
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........18
Viscosity, Engine Oil ...................... 401
Voice Recognition System (VR) .............. 127
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............188
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information .....................462
Washer
Adding Fluid ....................... 409
Washers, Windshield ................ 152,155,409
Washing Vehicle ......................... 423
Water
Driving Through ..................... 301
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................425
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................425
Wind Buffeting .......................37,169
Window Fogging ........................ 280
Windows ..............................34
Power .............................34
Windshield Defroster ................ 86,271,277
Windshield Washers ................... 152,155
Fluid .............................409
Windshield Wiper Blades .................. 408
Windshield Wipers .......................152
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................408
Wipers, Intermittent ...................... 154
486 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
11C41-126-AF
Sixth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
